1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\documentclass{howto}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\usepackage{ltxmarkup}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\title{Documenting Python}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-04-19 04:50:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\makeindex
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\input{boilerplate}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 18:24:02 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Now override the stuff that includes author information;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Guido did *not* write this one!
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\author{Fred L. Drake, Jr.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\authoraddress{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-28 04:08:38 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									PythonLabs \\
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-14 02:34:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									Email: \email{fdrake@acm.org}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{document}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\maketitle
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{abstract}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\noindent
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 05:26:43 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The Python language has a substantial body of
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								documentation, much of it contributed by various authors.  The markup
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								used for the Python documentation is based on \LaTeX{} and requires a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								significant set of macros written specifically for documenting Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-06-11 14:25:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This document describes the macros introduced to support Python
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								documentation and how they should be used to support a wide range of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								output formats.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This document describes the document classes and special markup used
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								in the Python documentation.  Authors may use this guide, in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								conjunction with the template files provided with the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								distribution, to create or maintain whole documents or sections.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{abstract}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\tableofcontents
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Introduction \label{intro}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Python's documentation has long been considered to be good for a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  free programming language.  There are a number of reasons for this,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  the most important being the early commitment of Python's creator,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Guido van Rossum, to providing documentation on the language and its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  libraries, and the continuing involvement of the user community in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  providing assistance for creating and maintaining documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The involvement of the community takes many forms, from authoring to
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  bug reports to just plain complaining when the documentation could
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  be more complete or easier to use.  All of these forms of input from
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  the community have proved useful during the time I've been involved
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  in maintaining the documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  This document is aimed at authors and potential authors of
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  documentation for Python.  More specifically, it is for people
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  contributing to the standard documentation and developing additional
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  documents using the same tools as the standard documents.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  guide will be less useful for authors using the Python documentation
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  tools for topics other than Python, and less useful still for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  authors not using the tools at all.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The material in this guide is intended to assist authors using the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Python documentation tools.  It includes information on the source
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  distribution of the standard documentation, a discussion of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  document types, reference material on the markup defined in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  document classes, a list of the external tools needed for processing
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  documents, and reference material on the tools provided with the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  documentation resources.  At the end, there is also a section
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  discussing future directions for the Python documentation and where
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  to turn for more information.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Directory Structure \label{directories}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The source distribution for the standard Python documentation
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  contains a large number of directories.  While third-party documents
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  do not need to be placed into this structure or need to be placed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  within a similar structure, it can be helpful to know where to look
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  for examples and tools when developing new documents using the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Python documentation tools.  This section describes this directory
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  structure.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The documentation sources are usually placed within the Python
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  source distribution as the top-level directory \file{Doc/}, but
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  are not dependent on the Python source distribution in any way.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The \file{Doc/} directory contains a few files and several
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  subdirectories.  The files are mostly self-explanatory, including a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \file{README} and a \file{Makefile}.  The directories fall into
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  three categories:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{definitions}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \term{Document Sources}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									The \LaTeX{} sources for each document are placed in a
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 05:26:43 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									separate directory.  These directories are given short
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									names which vaguely indicate the document in each:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									\begin{tableii}{p{.75in}|p{3in}}{filenq}{Directory}{Document Title}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-07 20:06:07 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{api/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../api/api.html]{The Python/C API}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{dist/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../dist/dist.html]{Distributing Python Modules}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{doc/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../doc/doc.html]{Documenting Python}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{ext/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../ext/ext.html]{Extending and Embedding the Python Interpreter}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{inst/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../inst/inst.html]{Installing Python Modules}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{lib/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../lib/lib.html]{Python Library Reference}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{mac/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../mac/mac.html]{Macintosh Module Reference}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{ref/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../ref/ref.html]{Python Reference Manual}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{tut/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            {\citetitle[../tut/tut.html]{Python Tutorial}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									\end{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \term{Format-Specific Output}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									Most output formats have a directory which contains a
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									\file{Makefile} which controls the generation of that format
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									and provides storage for the formatted documents.  The only
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									variations within this category are the Portable Document
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Format (PDF) and PostScript versions are placed in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									directories \file{paper-a4/} and \file{paper-letter/} (this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									causes all the temporary files created by \LaTeX{} to be kept
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									in the same place for each paper size, where they can be more
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									easily ignored).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									\begin{tableii}{p{.75in}|p{3in}}{filenq}{Directory}{Output Formats}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{html/}{HTML output}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{info/}{GNU info output}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-01-17 12:35:20 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{isilo/}{\ulink{iSilo}{http://www.isilo.com/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                	  documents (for Palm OS devices)}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{paper-a4/}{PDF and PostScript, A4 paper}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{paper-letter/}{PDF and PostScript, US-Letter paper}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									\end{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \term{Supplemental Files}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									Some additional directories are used to store supplemental
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									files used for the various processes.  Directories are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									included for the shared \LaTeX{} document classes, the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									\LaTeX2HTML support, template files for various document
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									components, and the scripts used to perform various steps in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									the formatting processes.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									\begin{tableii}{p{.75in}|p{3in}}{filenq}{Directory}{Contents}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{perl/}{Support for \LaTeX2HTML processing}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{templates/}{Example files for source documents}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{texinputs/}{Style implementation for \LaTeX}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									  \lineii{tools/}{Custom processing scripts}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									\end{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{definitions}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Style Guide \label{style-guide}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The Python documentation should follow the \citetitle
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  [http://developer.apple.com/techpubs/macos8/pdf/apple_styleguide00.pdf]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  {Apple Publications Style Guide} wherever possible.  This particular
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  style guide was selected mostly because it seems reasonable and is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  easy to get online.  (Printed copies are available; see the Apple's
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \citetitle[http://developer.apple.com/techpubs/faq.html]{Developer
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Documentation FAQ} for more information.)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Topics which are not covered in the Apple's style guide will be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  discussed in this document if necessary.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Many special names are used in the Python documentation, including
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  the names of operating systems, programming languages, standards
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  bodies, and the like.  Many of these were assigned \LaTeX{} macros
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  at some point in the distant past, and these macros lived on long
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-14 02:34:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  past their usefulness.  In the current markup, most of these entities
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  are not assigned any special markup, but the preferred spellings are
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  given here to aid authors in maintaining the consistency of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  presentation in the Python documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-14 02:34:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Other terms and words deserve special mention as well; these conventions
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  should be used to ensure consistency throughout the documentation:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-14 02:34:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \item[CPU]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    For ``central processing unit.''  Many style guides say this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    should be spelled out on the first use (and if you must use it,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    do so!).  For the Python documentation, this abbreviation should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    be avoided since there's no reasonable way to predict which occurance
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    will be the first seen by the reader.  It is better to use the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    word ``processor'' instead.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \item[\POSIX]
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									The name assigned to a particular group of standards.  This is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-14 02:34:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									always uppercase.  Use the macro \macro{POSIX} to represent this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    name.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \item[Python]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									The name of our favorite programming language is always
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									capitalized.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \item[Unicode]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									The name of a character set and matching encoding.  This is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-14 02:34:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    always written capitalized.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \item[\UNIX]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The name of the operating system developed at AT\&T Bell Labs
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    in the early 1970s.  Use the macro \macro{UNIX} to use this name.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{\LaTeX{} Primer \label{latex-primer}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  This section is a brief introduction to \LaTeX{} concepts and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  syntax, to provide authors enough information to author documents
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  productively without having to become ``\TeX{}nicians.''
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-06-11 14:25:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Perhaps the most important concept to keep in mind while marking up
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 05:26:43 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Python documentation is that while \TeX{} is unstructured, \LaTeX{} was
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-06-11 14:25:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  designed as a layer on top of \TeX{} which specifically supports 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  structured markup.  The Python-specific markup is intended to extend
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  the structure provided by standard \LaTeX{} document classes to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  support additional information specific to Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \LaTeX{} documents contain two parts: the preamble and the body.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The preamble is used to specify certain metadata about the document
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  itself, such as the title, the list of authors, the date, and the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \emph{class} the document belongs to.  Additional information used
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  to control index generation and the use of bibliographic databases
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  can also be placed in the preamble.  For most authors, the preamble
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  can be most easily created by copying it from an existing document
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  and modifying a few key pieces of information.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The \dfn{class} of a document is used to place a document within a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  broad category of documents and set some fundamental formatting
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  properties.  For Python documentation, two classes are used: the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \code{manual} class and the \code{howto} class.  These classes also
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  define the additional markup used to document Python concepts and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  structures.  Specific information about these classes is provided in
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  section \ref{classes}, ``Document Classes,'' below.  The first thing
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  in the preamble is the declaration of the document's class.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  After the class declaration, a number of \emph{macros} are used to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  provide further information about the document and setup any
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  additional markup that is needed.  No output is generated from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  preamble; it is an error to include free text in the preamble
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  because it would cause output.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The document body follows the preamble.  This contains all the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  printed components of the document marked up structurally.  Generic
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \LaTeX{} structures include hierarchical sections, numbered and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  bulleted lists, and special structures for the document abstract and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  indexes.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Syntax \label{latex-syntax}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    There are some things that an author of Python documentation needs
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    to know about \LaTeX{} syntax.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    A \dfn{comment} is started by the ``percent'' character
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    (\character{\%}) and continues through the end of the line and all
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    leading whitespace on the following line.  This is a little
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    different from any programming language I know of, so an example
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    is in order:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This is text.% comment
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    This is more text.  % another comment
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Still more text.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The first non-comment character following the first comment is the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    letter \character{T} on the second line; the leading whitespace on
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    that line is consumed as part of the first comment.  This means
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    that there is no space between the first and second sentences, so
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the period and letter \character{T} will be directly adjacent in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the typeset document.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Note also that though the first non-comment character after the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    second comment is the letter \character{S}, there is whitespace
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    preceding the comment, so the two sentences are separated as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    expected.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    A \dfn{group} is an enclosure for a collection of text and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    commands which encloses the formatting context and constrains the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    scope of any changes to that context made by commands within the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    group.  Groups can be nested hierarchically.  The formatting
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    context includes the font and the definition of additional macros
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    (or overrides of macros defined in outer groups).  Syntactically,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    groups are enclosed in braces:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{text in a group}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    An alternate syntax for a group using brackets, \code{[...]}, is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    used by macros and environment constructors which take optional
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    parameters; brackets do not normally hold syntactic significance.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    A degenerate group, containing only one atomic bit of content,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    does not need to have an explicit group, unless it is required to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    avoid ambiguity.  Since Python tends toward the explicit, groups
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    are also made explicit in the documentation markup.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Groups are used only sparingly in the Python documentation, except
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    for their use in marking parameters to macros and environments.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    A \dfn{macro} is usually a simple construct which is identified by
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    name and can take some number of parameters.  In normal \LaTeX{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    usage, one of these can be optional.  The markup is introduced
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    using the backslash character (\character{\e}), and the name is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    given by alphabetic characters (no digits, hyphens, or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    underscores).  Required parameters should be marked as a group,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    and optional parameters should be marked using the alternate
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    syntax for a group.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    For example, a macro named ``foo'' which takes a single parameter
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    would appear like this:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\name{parameter}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    A macro which takes an optional parameter would be typed like this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    when the optional paramter is given:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\name[optional]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    If both optional and required parameters are to be required, it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    looks like this:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\name[optional]{required}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    A macro name may be followed by a space or newline; a space
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    between the macro name and any parameters will be consumed, but
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    this usage is not practiced in the Python documentation.  Such a
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    space is still consumed if there are no parameters to the macro,
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    in which case inserting an empty group (\code{\{\}}) or explicit
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    word space (\samp{\e\ }) immediately after the macro name helps to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    avoid running the expansion of the macro into the following text.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Macros which take no parameters but which should not be followed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    by a word space do not need special treatment if the following
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    character in the document source if not a name character (such as
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    punctuation).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Each line of this example shows an appropriate way to write text
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    which includes a macro which takes no parameters:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This \UNIX{} is followed by a space.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This \UNIX\ is also followed by a space.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\UNIX, followed by a comma, needs no additional markup.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    An \dfn{environment} is a larger construct than a macro, and can
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    be used for things with more content than would conveniently fit
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    in a macro parameter.  They are primarily used when formatting
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    parameters need to be changed before and after a large chunk of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    content, but the content itself needs to be highly flexible.  Code
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    samples are presented using an environment, and descriptions of
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    functions, methods, and classes are also marked using environments.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Since the content of an environment is free-form and can consist
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    of several paragraphs, they are actually marked using a pair of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macros: \macro{begin} and \macro{end}.  These macros both take the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    name of the environment as a parameter.  An example is the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    environment used to mark the abstract of a document:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{abstract}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  This is the text of the abstract.  It concisely explains what
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  information is found in the document.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  It can consist of multiple paragraphs.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{abstract}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    An environment can also have required and optional parameters of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    its own.  These follow the parameter of the \macro{begin} macro.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    This example shows an environment which takes a single required
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    parameter:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-03-28 16:51:20 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{datadesc}{controlnames}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  A 33-element string array that contains the \ASCII{} mnemonics for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  the thirty-two \ASCII{} control characters from 0 (NUL) to 0x1f
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  (US), in order, plus the mnemonic \samp{SP} for the space character.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{datadesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    There are a number of less-used marks in \LaTeX{} which are used
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-03-13 02:48:24 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    to enter characters which are not found in \ASCII{} or which a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    considered special, or \emph{active} in \TeX{} or \LaTeX.  Given
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    that these are often used adjacent to other characters, the markup
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    required to produce the proper character may need to be followed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    by a space or an empty group, or the markup can be enclosed in a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    group.  Some which are found in Python documentation are:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{tableii}{c|l}{textrm}{Character}{Markup}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-03-13 02:48:24 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{\textasciicircum}{\code{\e textasciicircum}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{\textasciitilde}{\code{\e textasciitilde}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{\textgreater}{\code{\e textgreater}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{\textless}{\code{\e textless}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{\c c}{\code{\e c c}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{\"o}{\code{\e"o}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{\o}{\code{\e o}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-04-19 04:50:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Hierarchical Structure \label{latex-structure}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \LaTeX{} expects documents to be arranged in a conventional,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    hierarchical way, with chapters, sections, sub-sections,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    appendixes, and the like.  These are marked using macros rather
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    than environments, probably because the end of a section can be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    safely inferred when a section of equal or higher level starts.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    There are six ``levels'' of sectioning in the document classes
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:12:47 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    used for Python documentation, and the deepest two
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    levels\footnote{The deepest levels have the highest numbers in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      table.} are not used.  The levels are:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \begin{tableiii}{c|l|c}{textrm}{Level}{Macro Name}{Notes}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \lineiii{1}{\macro{chapter}}{(1)}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \lineiii{2}{\macro{section}}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \lineiii{3}{\macro{subsection}}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-11-27 20:10:18 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \lineiii{4}{\macro{subsubsection}}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-20 20:51:31 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \lineiii{5}{\macro{paragraph}}{(2)}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \lineiii{6}{\macro{subparagraph}}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \end{tableiii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \noindent
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Notes:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[(1)]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Only used for the \code{manual} documents, as described in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      section \ref{classes}, ``Document Classes.''
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[(2)]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Not the same as a paragraph of text; nobody seems to use this.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Document Classes \label{classes}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Two \LaTeX{} document classes are defined specifically for use with
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  the Python documentation.  The \code{manual} class is for large
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  documents which are sectioned into chapters, and the \code{howto}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  class is for smaller documents.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The \code{manual} documents are larger and are used for most of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  standard documents.  This document class is based on the standard
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \LaTeX{} \code{report} class and is formatted very much like a long
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-11-10 15:54:57 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  technical report.  The \citetitle[../ref/ref.html]{Python Reference
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Manual} is a good example of a \code{manual} document, and the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \citetitle[../lib/lib.html]{Python Library Reference} is a large
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  example.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The \code{howto} documents are shorter, and don't have the large
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  structure of the \code{manual} documents.  This class is based on
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  the standard \LaTeX{} \code{article} class and is formatted somewhat
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  like the Linux Documentation Project's ``HOWTO'' series as done
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  originally using the LinuxDoc software.  The original intent for the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  document class was that it serve a similar role as the LDP's HOWTO
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  series, but the applicability of the class turns out to be somewhat
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 05:26:43 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  broader.  This class is used for ``how-to'' documents (this
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  document is an example) and for shorter reference manuals for small,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  fairly cohesive module libraries.  Examples of the later use include
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-15 22:11:24 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\citetitle[http://starship.python.net/crew/fdrake/manuals/krb5py/krb5py.html]{Using
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Kerberos from Python}, which contains reference material for an
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  extension package.  These documents are roughly equivalent to a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  single chapter from a larger work.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Special Markup Constructs \label{special-constructs}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The Python document classes define a lot of new environments and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  macros.  This section contains the reference material for these
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  facilities.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-14 20:11:05 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Markup for the Preamble \label{preamble-info}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{release}{\p{ver}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Set the version number for the software described in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      document.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{setshortversion}{\p{sver}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Specify the ``short'' version number of the documented software
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      to be \var{sver}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-03 04:51:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Meta-information Markup \label{meta-info}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{sectionauthor}{\p{author}\p{email}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Identifies the author of the current section.  \var{author}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should be the author's name such that it can be used for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      presentation (though it isn't), and \var{email} should be the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      author's email address.  The domain name portion of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the address should be lower case.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      No presentation is generated from this markup, but it is used to 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      help keep track of contributions.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Information Units \label{info-units}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    XXX Explain terminology, or come up with something more ``lay.''
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    There are a number of environments used to describe specific
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    features provided by modules.  Each environment requires
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    parameters needed to provide basic information about what is being
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    described, and the environment content should be the description.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Most of these environments make entries in the general index (if
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    one is being produced for the document); if no index entry is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    desired, non-indexing variants are available for many of these
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    environments.  The environments have names of the form
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \code{\var{feature}desc}, and the non-indexing variants are named
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \code{\var{feature}descni}.  The available variants are explicitly
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    included in the list below.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    For each of these environments, the first parameter, \var{name},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    provides the name by which the feature is accessed.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Environments which describe features of objects within a module,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    such as object methods or data attributes, allow an optional
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \var{type name} parameter.  When the feature is an attribute of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    class instances, \var{type name} only needs to be given if the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    class was not the most recently described class in the module; the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \var{name} value from the most recent \env{classdesc} is implied.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    For features of built-in or extension types, the \var{type name}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    value should always be provided.  Another special case includes
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    methods and members of general ``protocols,'' such as the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    formatter and writer protocols described for the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \module{formatter} module: these may be documented without any
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    specific implementation classes, and will always require the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \var{type name} parameter to be provided.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-16 21:23:25 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{cfuncdesc}{\p{type}\p{name}\p{args}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Environment used to described a C function.  The \var{type}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should be specified as a \keyword{typedef} name, \code{struct
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{tag}}, or the name of a primitive type.  If it is a pointer
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 05:26:43 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      type, the trailing asterisk should not be preceded by a space.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-16 21:23:25 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{name} should be the name of the function (or function-like
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      pre-processor macro), and \var{args} should give the types and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      names of the parameters.  The names need to be given so they may
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be used in the description.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-04-15 20:10:23 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{cmemberdesc}{\p{container}\p{type}\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Description for a structure member.  \var{container} should be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the \keyword{typedef} name, if there is one, otherwise if should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be \samp{struct \var{tag}}.  The type of the member should given
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      as \var{type}, and the name should be given as \var{name}.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      text of the description should include the range of values
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      allowed, how the value should be interpreted, and whether the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      value can be changed.  References to structure members in text
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should use the \macro{member} macro.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-04-09 20:17:42 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{csimplemacrodesc}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Documentation for a ``simple'' macro.  Simple macros are macros
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      which are used for code expansion, but which do not take
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      arguments so cannot be described as functions.  This is not to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be used for simple constant definitions.  Examples of it's use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      in the Python documentation include
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \csimplemacro{PyObject_HEAD} and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \csimplemacro{Py_BEGIN_ALLOW_THREADS}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-16 21:23:25 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{ctypedesc}{\op{tag}\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Environment used to described a C type.  The \var{name}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      parameter should be the \keyword{typedef} name.  If the type is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      defined as a \keyword{struct} without a \keyword{typedef},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{name} should have the form \code{struct \var{tag}}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{name} will be added to the index unless \var{tag} is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      provided, in which case \var{tag} will be used instead.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{tag} should not be used for a \keyword{typedef} name.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{cvardesc}{\p{type}\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Description of a global C variable.  \var{type} should be the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \keyword{typedef} name, \code{struct \var{tag}}, or the name of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      a primitive type.  If variable has a pointer type, the trailing
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 05:26:43 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      asterisk should \emph{not} be preceded by a space.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-16 21:23:25 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{datadesc}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      This environment is used to document global data in a module,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      including both variables and values used as ``defined
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      constants.''  Class and object attributes are not documented
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      using this environment.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{datadescni}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \env{datadesc}, but without creating any index entries.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-05-11 01:01:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{excclassdesc}{\p{name}\p{constructor parameters}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Descibe an exception defined by a class.  \var{constructor
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      parameters} should not include the \var{self} parameter or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the parentheses used in the call syntax.  To describe an
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      exception class without describing the parameters to its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      constructor, use the \env{excdesc} environment.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{excdesc}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Describe an exception.  This may be either a string exception or
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-05-11 01:01:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      a class exception.  In the case of class exceptions, the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      constructor parameters are not described; use \env{excclassdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      to describe an exception class and its constructor.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{funcdesc}{\p{name}\p{parameters}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Describe a module-level function.  \var{parameters} should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      not include the parentheses used in the call syntax.  Object
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      methods are not documented using this environment.  Bound object
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      methods placed in the module namespace as part of the public
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      interface of the module are documented using this, as they are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      equivalent to normal functions for most purposes.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The description should include information about the parameters
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      required and how they are used (especially whether mutable
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      objects passed as parameters are modified), side effects, and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      possible exceptions.  A small example may be provided.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{funcdescni}{\p{name}\p{parameters}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \env{funcdesc}, but without creating any index entries.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{classdesc}{\p{name}\p{constructor parameters}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Describe a class and its constructor.  \var{constructor
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      parameters} should not include the \var{self} parameter or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the parentheses used in the call syntax.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-05-11 01:01:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{classdesc*}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Describe a class without describing the constructor.  This can
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be used to describe classes that are merely containers for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      attributes or which should never be instantiated or subclassed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      by user code.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{memberdesc}{\op{type name}\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Describe an object data attribute.  The description should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      include information about the type of the data to be expected
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      and whether it may be changed directly.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{memberdescni}{\op{type name}\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \env{memberdesc}, but without creating any index entries.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{methoddesc}{\op{type name}\p{name}\p{parameters}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Describe an object method.  \var{parameters} should not include
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the \var{self} parameter or the parentheses used in the call
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      syntax.  The description should include similar information to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      that described for \env{funcdesc}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{methoddescni}{\op{type name}\p{name}\p{parameters}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \env{methoddesc}, but without creating any index entries.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Showing Code Examples \label{showing-examples}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-06-11 14:25:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Examples of Python source code or interactive sessions are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    represented as \env{verbatim} environments.  This environment
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    is a standard part of \LaTeX{}.  It is important to only use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    spaces for indentation in code examples since \TeX{} drops tabs
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    instead of converting them to spaces.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Representing an interactive session requires including the prompts
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    and output along with the Python code.  No special markup is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    required for interactive sessions.  After the last line of input
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    or output presented, there should not be an ``unused'' primary
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    prompt; this is an example of what \emph{not} to do:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								>>> 1 + 1
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								2
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								>>> 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-06-11 14:25:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Within the \env{verbatim} environment, characters special to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \LaTeX{} do not need to be specially marked in any way.  The entire
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    example will be presented in a monospaced font; no attempt at
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ``pretty-printing'' is made, as the environment must work for
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    non-Python code and non-code displays.  There should be no blank
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lines at the top or bottom of any \env{verbatim} display.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-06-11 14:25:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-06-18 14:59:58 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Longer displays of verbatim text may be included by storing the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    example text in an external file containing only plain text.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    file may be included using the standard \macro{verbatiminput}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macro; this macro takes a single argument naming the file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    containing the text.  For example, to include the Python source
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    file \file{example.py}, use:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\verbatiminput{example.py}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Use of \macro{verbatiminput} allows easier use of special editing
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    modes for the included file.  The file should be placed in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    same directory as the \LaTeX{} files for the document.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-06-11 14:25:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The Python Documentation Special Interest Group has discussed a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    number of approaches to creating pretty-printed code displays and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    interactive sessions; see the Doc-SIG area on the Python Web site
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    for more information on this topic.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Inline Markup \label{inline-markup}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 15:22:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The macros described in this section are used to mark just about
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    anything interesting in the document text.  They may be used in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    headings (though anything involving hyperlinks should be avoided
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    there) as well as in the body text.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{bfcode}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \macro{code}, but also makes the font bold-face.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{cdata}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a C-language variable.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{cfunction}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a C-language function.  \var{name} should include the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      function name and the trailing parentheses.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{character}{\p{char}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A character when discussing the character rather than a one-byte
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      string value.  The character will be typeset as with \macro{samp}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-11-10 22:51:18 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{citetitle}{\op{url}\p{title}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A title for a referenced publication.  If \var{url} is specified,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the title will be made into a hyperlink when formatted as HTML.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{class}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A class name; a dotted name may be used.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{code}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A short code fragment or literal constant value.  Typically, it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should not include any spaces since no quotation marks are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      added.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{constant}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a ``defined'' constant.  This may be a C-language
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\#define} or a Python variable that is not intended to be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      changed.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-04-09 20:17:42 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{csimplemacro}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a ``simple'' macro.  Simple macros are macros
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      which are used for code expansion, but which do not take
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      arguments so cannot be described as functions.  This is not to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be used for simple constant definitions.  Examples of it's use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      in the Python documentation include
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \csimplemacro{PyObject_HEAD} and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \csimplemacro{Py_BEGIN_ALLOW_THREADS}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{ctype}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a C \keyword{typedef} or structure.  For structures
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      defined without a \keyword{typedef}, use \code{\e ctype\{struct
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      struct_tag\}} to make it clear that the \keyword{struct} is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      required.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{deprecated}{\p{version}\p{what to do}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Declare whatever is being described as being deprecated starting 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      with release \var{version}.  The text given as \var{what to do}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-05-21 16:27:20 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should recommend something to use instead.  It should be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      complete sentences.  The entire deprecation notice will be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      presented as a separate paragraph; it should either preceed or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      succeed the description of the deprecated feature.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{dfn}{\p{term}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Mark the defining instance of \var{term} in the text.  (No index 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      entries are generated.)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 16:33:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{e}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Produces a backslash.  This is convenient in \macro{code} and
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-07 20:06:07 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      similar macros, and is only defined there.  To create a
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-11 19:08:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      backslash in ordinary text (such as the contents of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{file} macro), use the standard \macro{textbackslash} macro.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 16:33:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{email}{\p{address}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      An email address.  Note that this is \emph{not} hyperlinked in
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-03 04:51:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      any of the possible output formats.  The domain name portion of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the address should be lower case.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{emph}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Emphasized text; this will be presented in an italic font.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{envvar}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      An environment variable.  Index entries are generated.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{exception}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of an exception.  A dotted name may be used.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{file}{\p{file or dir}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a file or directory.  In the PDF and PostScript
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      outputs, single quotes and a font change are used to indicate
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the file name, but no quotes are used in the HTML output.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-20 04:18:14 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \warning{The \macro{file} macro cannot be used in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      content of a section title due to processing limitations.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{filenq}{\p{file or dir}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \macro{file}, but single quotes are never used.  This can
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be used in conjunction with tables if a column will only contain 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      file or directory names.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-20 04:18:14 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \warning{The \macro{filenq} macro cannot be used in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      content of a section title due to processing limitations.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{function}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a Python function; dotted names may be used.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{infinity}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The symbol for mathematical infinity: \infinity.  Some Web
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      browsers are not able to render the HTML representation of this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      symbol properly, but support is growing.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{kbd}{\p{key sequence}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Mark a sequence of keystrokes.  What form \var{key sequence}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      takes may depend on platform- or application-specific
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-12 02:08:29 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      conventions.  When there are no relevant conventions, the names
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      of modifier keys should be spelled out, to improve accessibility
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      for new users and non-native speakers.  For example, an
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \program{xemacs} key sequence may be marked like
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e kbd\{C-x C-f\}}, but without reference to a specific
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      application or platform, the same sequence should be marked as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e kbd\{Control-x Control-f\}}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{keyword}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a keyword in a programming language.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-09-26 17:01:58 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{mailheader}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of an \rfc{822}-style mail header.  This markup does
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      not imply that the header is being used in an email message, but
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      can be used to refer to any header of the same ``style.''  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      is also used for headers defined by the various MIME
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      specifications.  The header name should be entered in the same
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      way it would normally be found in practice, with the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      camel-casing conventions being preferred where there is more
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-09-26 18:43:20 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      than one common usage.  The colon which follows the name of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      header should not be included.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      For example: \code{\e mailheader\{Content-Type\}}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-09-26 17:01:58 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{makevar}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a \program{make} variable.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{manpage}{\p{name}\p{section}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A reference to a \UNIX{} manual page.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{member}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a data attribute of an object.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{method}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a method of an object.  \var{name} should include the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      method name and the trailing parentheses.  A dotted name may be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      used.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{mimetype}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-09-26 17:01:58 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a MIME type, or a component of a MIME type (the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      major or minor portion, taken alone).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{module}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-11 19:08:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								       The name of a module; a dotted name may be used.  This should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								       also be used for package names.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{newsgroup}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-14 02:34:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a Usenet newsgroup.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-09 18:01:23 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{note}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      An especially important bit of information about an API that a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      user should be aware of when using whatever bit of API the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      note pertains to.  This should be the last thing in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      paragraph as the end of the note is not visually marked in
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-20 04:18:14 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      any way.  The content of \var{text} should be written in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      complete sentences and include all appropriate punctuation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-09 18:01:23 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{pep}{\p{number}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A reference to a Python Enhancement Proposal.  This generates
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      appropriate index entries.  The text \samp{PEP \var{number}} is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      generated; in the HTML output, this text is a hyperlink to an
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      online copy of the specified PEP.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{plusminus}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The symbol for indicating a value that may take a positive or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      negative value of a specified magnitude, typically represented
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      by a plus sign placed over a minus sign.  For example:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-09-26 18:43:20 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e plusminus 3\%{}}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{program}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of an executable program.  This may differ from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      file name for the executable for some platforms.  In particular, 
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-10-10 18:24:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the \file{.exe} (or other) extension should be omitted for 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Windows programs.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-11-10 22:51:18 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{programopt}{\p{option}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-11 18:52:52 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A command-line option to an executable program.  Use this only
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-06-29 01:23:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      for ``short'' options, and include the leading hyphen.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-11 18:52:52 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{longprogramopt}{\p{option}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A long command-line option to an executable program.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should only be used for long option names which will be prefixed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      by two hyphens; the hyphens should not be provided as part of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{option}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-11-10 22:51:18 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{refmodule}{\op{key}\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \macro{module}, but create a hyperlink to the documentation 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      for the named module.  Note that the corresponding
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{declaremodule} must be in the same document.  If the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{declaremodule} defines a module key different from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      module name, it must also be provided as \var{key} to the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{refmodule} macro.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{regexp}{\p{string}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Mark a regular expression.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{rfc}{\p{number}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A reference to an Internet Request for Comments.  This generates 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      appropriate index entries.  The text \samp{RFC \var{number}} is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      generated; in the HTML output, this text is a hyperlink to an
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      online copy of the specified RFC.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{samp}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A short code sample, but possibly longer than would be given
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      using \macro{code}.  Since quotation marks are added, spaces are 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      acceptable.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-14 20:11:05 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{shortversion}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The ``short'' version number of the documented software, as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      specified using the \macro{setshortversion} macro in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      preamble.  For Python, the short version number for a release is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the first three characters of the \code{sys.version} value.  For
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      example, versions 2.0b1 and 2.0.1 both have a short version of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      2.0.  This may not apply for all packages; if
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{setshortversion} is not used, this produces an empty
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      expansion.  See also the \macro{version} macro.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{strong}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Strongly emphasized text; this will be presented using a bold
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      font.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{ulink}{\p{text}\p{url}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A hypertext link with a target specified by a URL, but for which
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the link text should not be the title of the resource.  For
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      resources being referenced by name, use the \macro{citetitle}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      macro.  Not all formatted versions support arbitrary hypertext
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      links.  Note that many characters are special to \LaTeX{} and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      this macro does not always do the right thing.  In particular,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the tilde character (\character{\~}) is mis-handled; encoding it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      as a hex-sequence does work, use \samp{\%7e} in place of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      tilde character.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 16:33:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{url}{\p{url}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A URL (or URN).  The URL will be presented as text.  In the HTML 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      and PDF formatted versions, the URL will also be a hyperlink.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      This can be used when referring to external resources without
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      specific titles; references to resources which have titles
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should be marked using the \macro{citetitle} macro.  See the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      comments about special characters in the description of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{ulink} macro for special considerations.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 16:33:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{var}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a variable or formal parameter in running text.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{version}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-14 20:11:05 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The version number of the described software, as specified using
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{release} in the preamble.  See also the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{shortversion} macro.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-28 16:43:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:19:06 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{versionadded}{\op{explanation}\p{version}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-05-02 17:43:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The version of Python which added the described feature to the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-04-18 05:19:06 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      library or C API.  \var{explanation} should be a \emph{brief}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      explanation of the change consisting of a capitalized sentence
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      fragment; a period will be appended by the formatting process.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      This is typically added to the end of the first paragraph of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      description before any availability notes.  The location should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be selected so the explanation makes sense and may vary as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      needed.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-05-02 17:43:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{versionchanged}{\op{explanation}\p{version}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The version of Python in which the named feature was changed in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      some way (new parameters, changed side effects, etc.).
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{explanation} should be a \emph{brief} explanation of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-10-19 05:36:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      change consisting of a capitalized sentence fragment; a
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-05-02 17:43:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      period will be appended by the formatting process.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      This is typically added to the end of the first paragraph of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      description before any availability notes and after
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{versionadded}.  The location should be selected so the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      explanation makes sense and may vary as needed.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-09 18:01:23 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{warning}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      An important bit of information about an API that a user should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be very aware of when using whatever bit of API the warning
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      pertains to.  This should be the last thing in the paragraph as
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-20 04:18:14 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the end of the warning is not visually marked in any way.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      content of \var{text} should be written in complete sentences
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      and include all appropriate punctuation.  This differs from
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{note} in that it is recommended over \macro{note} for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      information regarding security.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-09 18:01:23 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-14 22:50:06 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Miscellaneous Text Markup \label{misc-text-markup}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  In addition to the inline markup, some additional ``block'' markup
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  is defined to make it easier to bring attention to various bits of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  text.  The markup described here serves this purpose, and is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  intended to be used when marking one or more paragraphs or other
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  block constructs (such as \env{verbatim} environments).
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{envdesc}{notice}{\op{type}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Label some paragraphs as being worthy of additional attention from
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the reader.  What sort of attention is warrented can be indicated
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    by specifying the \var{type} of the notice.  The only values
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    defined for \var{type} are \code{note} and \code{warning}; these
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    are equivalent in intent to the inline markup of the same name.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    If \var{type} is omitted, \code{note} is used.  Additional values
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    may be defined in the future.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Module-specific Markup \label{module-markup}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The markup described in this section is used to provide information
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  about a module being documented.  A typical use of this markup
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  appears at the top of the section used to document a module.  A
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  typical example might look like this:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{\module{spam} ---
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         Access to the SPAM facility}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\declaremodule{extension}{spam}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \platform{Unix}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-14 02:34:12 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\modulesynopsis{Access to the SPAM facility of \UNIX.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\moduleauthor{Jane Doe}{jane.doe@frobnitz.org}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-08-11 17:37:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Python packages\index{packages} --- collections of modules that can
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  be described as a unit --- are documented using the same markup as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  modules.  The name for a module in a package should be typed in
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  ``fully qualified'' form (it should include the package name).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-08-11 17:37:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  For example, a module ``foo'' in package ``bar'' should be marked as
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-09-26 18:43:20 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \code{\e module\{bar.foo\}}, and the beginning of the reference
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-08-11 17:37:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  section would appear as:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{\module{bar.foo} ---
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         Module from the \module{bar} package}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\declaremodule{extension}{bar.foo}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\modulesynopsis{Nifty module from the \module{bar} package.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\moduleauthor{Jane Doe}{jane.doe@frobnitz.org}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Note that the name of a package is also marked using
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \macro{module}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{macrodesc}{declaremodule}{\op{key}\p{type}\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 15:22:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Requires two parameters: module type (\samp{standard},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \samp{builtin}, \samp{extension}, or \samp{}), and the module
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    name.  An optional parameter should be given as the basis for the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    module's ``key'' used for linking to or referencing the section.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The ``key'' should only be given if the module's name contains any
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    underscores, and should be the name with the underscores stripped.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Note that the \var{type} parameter must be one of the values
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    listed above or an error will be printed.  For modules which are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    contained in packages, the fully-qualified name should be given as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \var{name} parameter.  This should be the first thing after the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \macro{section} used to introduce the module.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{macrodesc}{platform}{\p{specifier}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Specifies the portability of the module.  \var{specifier} is a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    comma-separated list of keys that specify what platforms the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    module is available on.  The keys are short identifiers;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    examples that are in use include \samp{IRIX}, \samp{Mac},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \samp{Windows}, and \samp{Unix}.  It is important to use a key
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    which has already been used when applicable.  This is used to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    provide annotations in the Module Index and the HTML and GNU info
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    output.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{macrodesc}{modulesynopsis}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The \var{text} is a short, ``one line'' description of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    module that can be used as part of the chapter introduction.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    This is must be placed after \macro{declaremodule}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The synopsis is used in building the contents of the table
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inserted as the \macro{localmoduletable}.  No text is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    produced at the point of the markup.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{macrodesc}{moduleauthor}{\p{name}\p{email}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    This macro is used to encode information about who authored a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    module.  This is currently not used to generate output, but can be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    used to help determine the origin of the module.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Library-level Markup \label{library-markup}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    This markup is used when describing a selection of modules.  For
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-11-10 15:54:57 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    example, the \citetitle[../mac/mac.html]{Macintosh Library
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Modules} document uses this to help provide an overview of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    modules in the collection, and many chapters in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \citetitle[../lib/lib.html]{Python Library Reference} use it for
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the same purpose.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{macrodesc}{localmoduletable}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    If a \file{.syn} file exists for the current
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    chapter (or for the entire document in \code{howto} documents), a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \env{synopsistable} is created with the contents loaded from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \file{.syn} file.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Table Markup \label{table-markup}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    There are three general-purpose table environments defined which
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    should be used whenever possible.  These environments are defined
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    to provide tables of specific widths and some convenience for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    formatting.  These environments are not meant to be general
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    replacements for the standard \LaTeX{} table environments, but can
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    be used for an advantage when the documents are processed using
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the tools for Python documentation processing.  In particular, the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    generated HTML looks good!  There is also an advantage for the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-09 16:04:03 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    eventual conversion of the documentation to XML (see section
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \ref{futures}, ``Future Directions'').
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Each environment is named \env{table\var{cols}}, where \var{cols}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    is the number of columns in the table specified in lower-case
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Roman numerals.  Within each of these environments, an additional
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macro, \macro{line\var{cols}}, is defined, where \var{cols}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    matches the \var{cols} value of the corresponding table
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    environment.  These are supported for \var{cols} values of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \code{ii}, \code{iii}, and \code{iv}.  These environments are all
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 15:58:02 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    built on top of the \env{tabular} environment.  Variants based on
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the \env{longtable} environment are also provided.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-11 19:08:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Note that all tables in the standard Python documentation use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    vertical lines between columns, and this must be specified in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    markup for each table.  A general border around the outside of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    table is not used, but would be the responsibility of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 15:58:02 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    processor; the document markup should not include an exterior
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    border.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The \env{longtable}-based variants of the table environments are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    formatted with extra space before and after, so should only be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    used on tables which are long enough that splitting over multiple
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    pages is reasonable; tables with fewer than twenty rows should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    never by marked using the long flavors of the table environments.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The header row is repeated across the top of each part of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    table.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-11 19:08:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{tableii}{\p{colspec}\p{col1font}\p{heading1}\p{heading2}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Create a two-column table using the \LaTeX{} column specifier
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{colspec}.  The column specifier should indicate vertical
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      bars between columns as appropriate for the specific table, but
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should not specify vertical bars on the outside of the table
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      (that is considered a stylesheet issue).  The \var{col1font}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      parameter is used as a stylistic treatment of the first column
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      of the table: the first column is presented as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e\var{col1font}\{column1\}}.  To avoid treating the first
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      column specially, \var{col1font} may be \samp{textrm}.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      column headings are taken from the values \var{heading1} and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{heading2}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 15:58:02 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{longtableii}{\unspecified}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \env{tableii}, but produces a table which may be broken
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      across page boundaries.  The parameters are the same as for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \env{tableii}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{lineii}{\p{column1}\p{column2}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 15:58:02 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Create a single table row within a \env{tableii} or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \env{longtableii} environment.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The text for the first column will be generated by applying the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      macro named by the \var{col1font} value when the \env{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      was opened.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{tableiii}{\p{colspec}\p{col1font}\p{heading1}\p{heading2}\p{heading3}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like the \env{tableii} environment, but with a third column.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The heading for the third column is given by \var{heading3}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 15:58:02 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{longtableiii}{\unspecified}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \env{tableiii}, but produces a table which may be broken
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      across page boundaries.  The parameters are the same as for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \env{tableiii}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{lineiii}{\p{column1}\p{column2}\p{column3}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like the \macro{lineii} macro, but with a third column.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      text for the third column is given by \var{column3}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{tableiv}{\p{colspec}\p{col1font}\p{heading1}\p{heading2}\p{heading3}\p{heading4}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like the \env{tableiii} environment, but with a fourth column.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The heading for the fourth column is given by \var{heading4}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-21 15:58:02 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{longtableiv}{\unspecified}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \env{tableiv}, but produces a table which may be broken
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      across page boundaries.  The parameters are the same as for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \env{tableiv}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{lineiv}{\p{column1}\p{column2}\p{column3}\p{column4}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like the \macro{lineiii} macro, but with a fourth column.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      text for the fourth column is given by \var{column4}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-17 23:05:57 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{tablev}{\p{colspec}\p{col1font}\p{heading1}\p{heading2}\p{heading3}\p{heading4}\p{heading5}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like the \env{tableiv} environment, but with a fifth column.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The heading for the fifth column is given by \var{heading5}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{longtablev}{\unspecified}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like \env{tablev}, but produces a table which may be broken
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      across page boundaries.  The parameters are the same as for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \env{tablev}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{linev}{\p{column1}\p{column2}\p{column3}\p{column4}\p{column5}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Like the \macro{lineiv} macro, but with a fifth column.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      text for the fifth column is given by \var{column5}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    An additional table-like environment is \env{synopsistable}.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    table generated by this environment contains two columns, and each
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    row is defined by an alternate definition of
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-03 04:51:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \macro{modulesynopsis}.  This environment is not normally used by
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    authors, but is created by the \macro{localmoduletable} macro.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-08-14 21:36:19 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Here is a small example of a table given in the documentation for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the \module{warnings} module; markup inside the table cells is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    minimal so the markup for the table itself is readily discernable.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Here is the markup for the table:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{tableii}{l|l}{exception}{Class}{Description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{Warning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {This is the base class of all warning category classes.  It
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								          is a subclass of \exception{Exception}.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{UserWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {The default category for \function{warn()}.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{DeprecationWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Base category for warnings about deprecated features.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{SyntaxWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Base category for warnings about dubious syntactic
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								          features.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{RuntimeWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Base category for warnings about dubious runtime features.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-08-14 16:40:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{FutureWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									 {Base category for warnings about constructs that will change
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									 semantically in the future.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-08-14 21:36:19 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Here is the resulting table:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{tableii}{l|l}{exception}{Class}{Description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{Warning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {This is the base class of all warning category classes.  It
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								          is a subclass of \exception{Exception}.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{UserWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {The default category for \function{warn()}.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{DeprecationWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Base category for warnings about deprecated features.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{SyntaxWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Base category for warnings about dubious syntactic
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								          features.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{RuntimeWarning}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Base category for warnings about dubious runtime features.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Note that the class names are implicitly marked using the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \macro{exception} macro, since that is given as the \var{col1font}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    value for the \env{tableii} environment.  To create a table using
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    different markup for the first column, use \code{textrm} for the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \var{col1font} value and mark each entry individually.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    To add a horizontal line between vertical sections of a table, use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the standard \macro{hline} macro between the rows which should be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    separated:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{tableii}{l|l}{constant}{Language}{Audience}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{APL}{Masochists.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{BASIC}{First-time programmers on PC hardware.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{C}{\UNIX{} \&\ Linux kernel developers.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \hline
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{Python}{Everyone!}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Note that not all presentation formats are capable of displaying a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    horizontal rule in this position.  This is how the table looks in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the format you're reading now:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{tableii}{l|l}{constant}{Language}{Audience}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{APL}{Masochists.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{C}{\UNIX{} \&\ Linux kernel developers.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{JavaScript}{Web developers.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \hline
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineii{Python}{Everyone!}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{tableii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Reference List Markup \label{references}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Many sections include a list of references to module documentation
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    or external documents.  These lists are created using the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:09:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \env{seealso} or \env{seealso*} environments.  These environments
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    define some additional macros to support creating reference
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    entries in a reasonable manner.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-07-06 05:24:41 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The \env{seealso} environment is typically placed in a section
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    just before any sub-sections.  This is done to ensure that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    reference links related to the section are not hidden in a
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:09:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    subsection in the hypertext renditions of the documentation.  For
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the HTML output, it is shown as a ``side bar,'' boxed off from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    main flow of the text.  The \env{seealso*} environment is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    different in that it should be used when a list of references is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    being presented as part of the primary content; it is not
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    specially set off from the text.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-07-06 05:24:41 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{seealso}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      This environment creates a ``See also:'' heading and defines the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      markup used to describe individual references.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:09:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{seealso*}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      This environment is used to create a list of references which
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      form part of the main content.  It is not given a special
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      header and is not set off from the main flow of the text.  It
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      provides the same additional markup used to describe individual
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      references.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-12 17:52:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    For each of the following macros, \var{why} should be one or more
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    complete sentences, starting with a capital letter (unless it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    starts with an identifier, which should not be modified), and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ending with the apropriate punctuation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-07-06 05:24:41 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-12 19:58:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    These macros are only defined within the content of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:09:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \env{seealso} and \env{seealso*} environments.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-12 19:58:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{seemodule}{\op{key}\p{name}\p{why}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Refer to another module.  \var{why} should be a brief
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      explanation of why the reference may be interesting.  The module
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      name is given in \var{name}, with the link key given in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{key} if necessary.  In the HTML and PDF conversions, the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      module name will be a hyperlink to the referred-to module.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-10-20 04:18:14 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \note{The module must be documented in the same
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      document (the corresponding \macro{declaremodule} is required).}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-11 05:22:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{seepep}{\p{number}\p{title}\p{why}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Refer to an Python Enhancement Proposal (PEP).  \var{number}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should be the official number assigned by the PEP Editor,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{title} should be the human-readable title of the PEP as
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-07-06 05:24:41 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      found in the official copy of the document, and \var{why} should
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-11 05:22:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      explain what's interesting about the PEP.  This should be used
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      to refer the reader to PEPs which specify interfaces or language
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      features relevant to the material in the annotated section of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{seerfc}{\p{number}\p{title}\p{why}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Refer to an IETF Request for Comments (RFC).  Otherwise very
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      similar to \macro{seepep}.  This should be used
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      to refer the reader to PEPs which specify protocols or data
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-07-06 05:24:41 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      formats relevant to the material in the annotated section of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{seetext}{\p{text}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add arbitrary text \var{text} to the ``See also:'' list.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      can be used to refer to off-line materials or on-line materials
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-07-06 05:24:41 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      using the \macro{url} macro.  This should consist of one or more
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      complete sentences.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-09-12 17:52:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{seetitle}{\op{url}\p{title}\p{why}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add a reference to an external document named \var{title}.  If
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{url} is given, the title is made a hyperlink in the HTML
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      version of the documentation, and displayed below the title in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the typeset versions of the documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-07-06 05:24:41 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{seeurl}{\p{url}\p{why}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      References to specific on-line resources should be given using
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:09:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      the \macro{seeurl} macro if they don't have a meaningful title.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Online documents which have identifiable titles should be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      referenced using the \macro{seetitle} macro, using the optional
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      parameter to that macro to provide the URL.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Index-generating Markup \label{indexing}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Effective index generation for technical documents can be very
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-03 04:51:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    difficult, especially for someone familiar with the topic but not
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the creation of indexes.  Much of the difficulty arises in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    area of terminology: including the terms an expert would use for a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    concept is not sufficient.  Coming up with the terms that a novice
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    would look up is fairly difficult for an author who, typically, is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    an expert in the area she is writing on.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The truly difficult aspects of index generation are not areas with
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    which the documentation tools can help.  However, ease
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-03 04:51:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    of producing the index once content decisions are made is within
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the scope of the tools.  Markup is provided which the processing
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    software is able to use to generate a variety of kinds of index
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    entry with minimal effort.  Additionally, many of the environments
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    described in section \ref{info-units}, ``Information Units,'' will
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    generate appropriate entries into the general and module indexes.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The following macro can be used to control the generation of index
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    data, and should be used in the document preamble:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{makemodindex}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      This should be used in the document preamble if a ``Module
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Index'' is desired for a document containing reference material
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      on many modules.  This causes a data file
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 16:33:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{lib\var{jobname}.idx} to be created from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{declaremodule} macros.  This file can be processed by the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \program{makeindex} program to generate a file which can be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \macro{input} into the document at the desired location of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      module index.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    There are a number of macros that are useful for adding index
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    entries for particular concepts, many of which are specific to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    programming languages or even Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{bifuncindex}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 20:01:17 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add an index entry referring to a built-in function named
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{name}; parentheses should not be included after
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{name}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{exindex}{\p{exception}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add a reference to an exception named \var{exception}.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      exception may be either string- or class-based.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{kwindex}{\p{keyword}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add a reference to a language keyword (not a keyword parameter
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      in a function or method call).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{obindex}{\p{object type}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add an index entry for a built-in object type.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{opindex}{\p{operator}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add a reference to an operator, such as \samp{+}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{refmodindex}{\op{key}\p{module}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add an index entry for module \var{module}; if \var{module}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      contains an underscore, the optional parameter \var{key} should
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be provided as the same string with underscores removed.  An
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      index entry ``\var{module} (module)'' will be generated.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      is intended for use with non-standard modules implemented in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{refexmodindex}{\op{key}\p{module}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      As for \macro{refmodindex}, but the index entry will be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      ``\var{module} (extension module).''  This is intended for use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      with non-standard modules not implemented in Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{refbimodindex}{\op{key}\p{module}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      As for \macro{refmodindex}, but the index entry will be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      ``\var{module} (built-in module).''  This is intended for use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      with standard modules not implemented in Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{refstmodindex}{\op{key}\p{module}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      As for \macro{refmodindex}, but the index entry will be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      ``\var{module} (standard module).''  This is intended for use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      with standard modules implemented in Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{stindex}{\p{statement}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Add an index entry for a statement type, such as \keyword{print}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      or \keyword{try}/\keyword{finally}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      XXX Need better examples of difference from \macro{kwindex}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Additional macros are provided which are useful for conveniently
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    creating general index entries which should appear at many places
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    in the index by rotating a list of words.  These are simple macros
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    that simply use \macro{index} to build some number of index
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    entries.  Index entries build using these macros contain both
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    primary and secondary text.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{indexii}{\p{word1}\p{word2}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Build two index entries.  This is exactly equivalent to using
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word1}!\var{word2}\}} and 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word2}!\var{word1}\}}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{indexiii}{\p{word1}\p{word2}\p{word3}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Build three index entries.  This is exactly equivalent to using
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word1}!\var{word2} \var{word3}\}},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word2}!\var{word3}, \var{word1}\}}, and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word3}!\var{word1} \var{word2}\}}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{indexiv}{\p{word1}\p{word2}\p{word3}\p{word4}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      Build four index entries.  This is exactly equivalent to using
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word1}!\var{word2} \var{word3} \var{word4}\}},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word2}!\var{word3} \var{word4}, \var{word1}\}},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word3}!\var{word4}, \var{word1} \var{word2}\}},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \code{\e index\{\var{word4}!\var{word1} \var{word2} \var{word3}\}}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Grammar Production Displays \label{grammar-displays}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Special markup is available for displaying the productions of a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    formal grammar.  The markup is simple and does not attempt to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    model all aspects of BNF (or any derived forms), but provides
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    enough to allow context-free grammars to be displayed in a way
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    that causes uses of a symbol to be rendered as hyperlinks to the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    definition of the symbol.  There is one environment and a pair of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macros:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{envdesc}{productionlist}{\op{language}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      This environment is used to enclose a group of productions.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      two macros are only defined within this environment.  If a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      document descibes more than one language, the optional parameter
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{language} should be used to distinguish productions between
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      languages.  The value of the parameter should be a short name
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      that can be used as part of a filename; colons or other
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      characters that can't be used in filename across platforms
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      should be included.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{envdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{production}{\p{name}\p{definition}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      A production rule in the grammar.  The rule defines the symbol
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{name} to be \var{definition}.  \var{name} should not
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      contain any markup, and the use of hyphens in a document which
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      supports more than one grammar is undefined.  \var{definition}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      may contain \macro{token} macros and any additional content
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      needed to describe the grammatical model of \var{symbol}.  Only
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      one \macro{production} may be used to define a symbol ---
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      multiple definitions are not allowed.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{macrodesc}{token}{\p{name}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      The name of a symbol defined by a \macro{production} macro, used
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      in the \var{definition} of a symbol.  Where possible, this will
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      be rendered as a hyperlink to the definition of the symbol
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \var{name}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Note that the entire grammar does not need to be defined in a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    single \env{productionlist} environment; any number of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    groupings may be used to describe the grammar.  Every use of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \macro{token} must correspond to a \macro{production}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The following is an example taken from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \citetitle[../ref/identifiers.html]{Python Reference Manual}:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{productionlist}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \production{identifier}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								             {(\token{letter}|"_") (\token{letter} | \token{digit} | "_")*}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \production{letter}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								             {\token{lowercase} | \token{uppercase}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \production{lowercase}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								             {"a"..."z"}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \production{uppercase}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								             {"A"..."Z"}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \production{digit}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								             {"0"..."9"}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{productionlist}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-03 15:00:28 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-09-25 18:44:21 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Graphical Interface Components \label{gui-markup}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-06 22:34:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The components of graphical interfaces will be assigned markup, but
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-09-25 18:44:21 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  most of the specifics have not been determined.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{macrodesc}{menuselection}{\p{menupath}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Menu selections should be marked using a combination of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \macro{menuselection} and \macro{sub}.  This macro is used to mark
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    a complete sequence of menu selections, including selecting
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    submenus and choosing a specific operation, or any subsequence of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    such a sequence.  The names of individual selections should be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    separated by occurances of \macro{sub}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    For example, to mark the selection ``\menuselection{Start \sub
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Programs}'', use this markup:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\menuselection{Start \sub Programs}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    When including a selection that includes some trailing indicator,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    such as the ellipsis some operating systems use to indicate that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the command opens a dialog, the indicator should be omitted from
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the selection name.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \begin{macrodesc}{sub}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Separator for menu selections that include multiple levels.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macro is only defined within the context of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \macro{menuselection} macro.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \end{macrodesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Processing Tools \label{tools}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{External Tools \label{tools-external}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Many tools are needed to be able to process the Python
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    documentation if all supported formats are required.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    section lists the tools used and when each is required.  Consult
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    the \file{Doc/README} file to see if there are specific version
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    requirements for any of these.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{dvips}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        This program is a typical part of \TeX{} installations.  It is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        used to generate PostScript from the ``device independent''
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \file{.dvi} files.  It is needed for the conversion to
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        PostScript.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{emacs}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Emacs is the kitchen sink of programmers' editors, and a damn
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        fine kitchen sink it is.  It also comes with some of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        processing needed to support the proper menu structures for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Texinfo documents when an info conversion is desired.  This is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        needed for the info conversion.  Using \program{xemacs}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        instead of FSF \program{emacs} may lead to instability in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        conversion, but that's because nobody seems to maintain the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Emacs Texinfo code in a portable manner.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{latex}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-08-28 18:09:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \LaTeX{} is a large and extensible macro package by Leslie
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Lamport, based on \TeX, a world-class typesetter by Donald
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Knuth.  It is used for the conversion to PostScript, and is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        needed for the HTML conversion as well (\LaTeX2HTML requires
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        one of the intermediate files it creates).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{latex2html}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Probably the longest Perl script anyone ever attempted to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        maintain.  This converts \LaTeX{} documents to HTML documents,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        and does a pretty reasonable job.  It is required for the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        conversions to HTML and GNU info.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{lynx}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        This is a text-mode Web browser which includes an
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        HTML-to-plain text conversion.  This is used to convert
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \code{howto} documents to text.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{make}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Just about any version should work for the standard documents,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        but GNU \program{make} is required for the experimental
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        processes in \file{Doc/tools/sgmlconv/}, at least while
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-08-28 18:09:11 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        they're experimental.  This is not required for running the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-08-29 02:34:10 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \program{mkhowto} script.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{makeindex}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        This is a standard program for converting \LaTeX{} index data
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        to a formatted index; it should be included with all \LaTeX{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        installations.  It is needed for the PDF and PostScript
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        conversions.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{makeinfo}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        GNU \program{makeinfo} is used to convert Texinfo documents to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        GNU info files.  Since Texinfo is used as an intermediate
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        format in the info conversion, this program is needed in that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        conversion.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{pdflatex}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        pdf\TeX{} is a relatively new variant of \TeX, and is used to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        generate the PDF version of the manuals.  It is typically
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        installed as part of most of the large \TeX{} distributions.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \program{pdflatex} is pdf\TeX{} using the \LaTeX{} format.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{perl}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Perl is required for \LaTeX2HTML{} and one of the scripts used
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        to post-process \LaTeX2HTML output, as well as the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        HTML-to-Texinfo conversion.  This is required for
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        the HTML and GNU info conversions.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{python}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Python is used for many of the scripts in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \file{Doc/tools/} directory; it is required for all
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        conversions.  This shouldn't be a problem if you're interested
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        in writing documentation for Python!
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-24 14:38:34 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Internal Tools \label{tools-internal}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    This section describes the various scripts that are used to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    implement various stages of document processing or to orchestrate
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    entire build sequences.  Most of these tools are only useful
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    in the context of building the standard documentation, but some
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    are more general.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      \item[\program{mkhowto}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 15:22:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        This is the primary script used to format third-party
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									documents.  It contains all the logic needed to ``get it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									right.''  The proper way to use this script is to make a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									symbolic link to it or run it in place; the actual script file 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									must be stored as part of the documentation source tree,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									though it may be used to format documents outside the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2000-04-11 18:52:52 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									tree.  Use \program{mkhowto} \longprogramopt{help}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-11-09 18:03:00 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        for a list of
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-27 21:45:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        command line options.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 15:22:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 16:33:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \program{mkhowto} can be used for both \code{howto} and
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-09-25 21:41:22 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \code{manual} class documents.  It is usually a good idea to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        always use the latest version of this tool rather than a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        version from an older source release of Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 16:33:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 15:22:45 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
									XXX  Need more here.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-05-01 22:05:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Working on Cygwin \label{cygwin}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Installing the required tools under Cygwin under Cygwin can be a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    little tedious, if only because many packages are more difficult
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    to install under Cygwin.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Using the Cygwin installer, make sure your Cygwin installation
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    includes Perl, Python, and the \TeX{} packages.  Perl and Python
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    are located under \menuselection{Interpreters} in the installer
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The \TeX{} packages are located in the \menuselection{Text}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    section; installing the tetex-beta, texmf, texmf-base, and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    texmf-extra ensures that all the required packages are available.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    (There may be a more minimal set, but I've not spent time trying
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    to minimize the installation.)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The netpbm package is used by \LaTeX2HTML, and \emph{must} be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    installed before \LaTeX2HTML can be successfully installed, even
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    though they will never be used for most Python documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    References to download locations are located in the \ulink{netpbm
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    README}{http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/README}.  Install according
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    to the instructions.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \LaTeX2HTML can be installed from the source archive, but only
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    after munging one of the files in the distribution.  Edit the file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \file{L2hos.pm} in the top level of the unpacked distribution;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    near the bottom of the file, change the text
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \code{\$\textasciicircum{}O} with the text \code{'unix'}.  Proceed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    using this command to build and install the software:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% configure && make install
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-05-02 21:10:48 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    You should now be able to build at least the HTML, PDF, and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PostScript versions of the formatted documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-05-01 22:05:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Future Directions \label{futures}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The history of the Python documentation is full of changes, most of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  which have been fairly small and evolutionary.  There has been a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  great deal of discussion about making large changes in the markup
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  languages and tools used to process the documentation.  This section
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  deals with the nature of the changes and what appears to be the most
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  likely path of future development.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Structured Documentation \label{structured}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Most of the small changes to the \LaTeX{} markup have been made
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    with an eye to divorcing the markup from the presentation, making
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    both a bit more maintainable.  Over the course of 1998, a large
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    number of changes were made with exactly this in mind; previously,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    changes had been made but in a less systematic manner and with
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    more concern for not needing to update the existing content.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    result has been a highly structured and semantically loaded markup
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    language implemented in \LaTeX.  With almost no basic \TeX{} or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \LaTeX{} markup in use, however, the markup syntax is about the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    only evidence of \LaTeX{} in the actual document sources.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    One side effect of this is that while we've been able to use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    standard ``engines'' for manipulating the documents, such as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \LaTeX{} and \LaTeX2HTML, most of the actual transformations have
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    been created specifically for Python.  The \LaTeX{} document
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    classes and \LaTeX2HTML support are both complete implementations
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    of the specific markup designed for these documents.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Combining highly customized markup with the somewhat esoteric
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    systems used to process the documents leads us to ask some
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    questions:  Can we do this more easily?  and, Can we do this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    better?  After a great deal of discussion with the community, we
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    have determined that actively pursuing modern structured
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-29 14:55:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    documentation systems is worth some investment of time.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    There appear to be two real contenders in this arena: the Standard
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    General Markup Language (SGML), and the Extensible Markup Language
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    (XML).  Both of these standards have advantages and disadvantages,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    and many advantages are shared.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    SGML offers advantages which may appeal most to authors,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    especially those using ordinary text editors.  There are also
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    additional abilities to define content models.  A number of
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-09 16:04:03 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    high-quality tools with demonstrated maturity are available, but
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    most are not free; for those which are, portability issues remain
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    a problem.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The advantages of XML include the availability of a large number
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    of evolving tools.  Unfortunately, many of the associated
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    standards are still evolving, and the tools will have to follow
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    along.  This means that developing a robust tool set that uses
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    more than the basic XML 1.0 recommendation is not possible in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    short term.  The promised availability of a wide variety of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    high-quality tools which support some of the most important
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    related standards is not immediate.  Many tools are likely to be
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-07-09 16:04:03 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    free, and the portability issues of those which are, are not
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    expected to be significant.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    It turns out that converting to an XML or SGML system holds
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    promise for translators as well; how much can be done to ease the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    burden on translators remains to be seen, and may have some impact
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    on the schema and specific technologies used.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    XXX Eventual migration to XML.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The documentation will be moved to XML in the future, and tools
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    are being written which will convert the documentation from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    current format to something close to a finished version, to the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    extent that the desired information is already present in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    documentation.  Some XSLT stylesheets have been started for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    presenting a preliminary XML version as HTML, but the results are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    fairly rough..
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    The timeframe for the conversion is not clear since there doesn't
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    seem to be much time available to work on this, but the appearant
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    benefits are growing more substantial at a moderately rapid pace.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \subsection{Discussion Forums \label{discussion}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Discussion of the future of the Python documentation and related
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-23 14:41:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    topics takes place in the Documentation Special Interest Group, or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ``Doc-SIG.''  Information on the group, including mailing list
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    archives and subscription information, is available at
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    \url{http://www.python.org/sigs/doc-sig/}.  The SIG is open to all
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    interested parties.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Comments and bug reports on the standard documents should be sent
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    to \email{python-docs@python.org}.  This may include comments
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-04-22 13:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    about formatting, content, grammatical and spelling errors, or
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-05-17 16:33:54 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    this document.  You can also send comments on this document
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    directly to the author at \email{fdrake@acm.org}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-04-19 04:50:44 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\input{doc.ind}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											1999-03-16 16:09:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{document}
							 |